1

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﯿﮏ )‪( SKETCH‬‬

‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ) ‪( PART DESIGN‬‬

‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪-5‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ) ‪( ASSEMBLY DESIGN‬‬

‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯾﯽ )‪( DRAFTING‬‬

‫‪110‬‬ ‫‪-7‬ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ و ‪(PRINT)..‬‬

‫‪114‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻠﯽ‬

‫‪119‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫‪120‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪2‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ catia‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ ؟‬

‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ‪ catia‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮوﻑ ﺍوﻝ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ catia‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ‪ dasault systems‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺪ وﻟﯽ ﺍﺧﯿﺮﺍً ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭوی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺎﺕ وﯾﮋﻩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻗﻮی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯی ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ و ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ و ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺪوﻥ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪-2‬ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪی ﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
 ‫‪-3‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ )وﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻋﺪﺩی(ﭼﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ و ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ و ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ real time-4‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺛﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ historical-5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﺮﺩ و ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-6‬وﯾﮋﮔﯽ ‪ hybrid‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﮐﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ و ﺍﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫‪-7‬وﯾﮋﮔﯽ ‪ integrate‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﺎ (‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ و ﺗﺤﻠﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﯾﺸﻬﺎی ﻓﻨﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ :‬ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﮏ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺳﯿﺴﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮏ‬
‫و ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﮑﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ‪ g-code‬ﻣﯿﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺮﺍﺷﮑﺎﺭی‬
‫‪cnc‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎوﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺭو و ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﯾﯿﻨﮓ و ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﺭو ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﺭﺩ و ﻧﯿﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﮑﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬
‫)‪ (product‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﺻﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ و ﭘﯿﮕﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ ‪).‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻو ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪(.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ و ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪). .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻو ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ‪ xy,yz,zx‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ‪ :‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ‪ :‬ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪-5‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﺑﺮﻫﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ‬

‫‪5‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪catia‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪Start‬‬ ‫‪SmarTeam‬‬ ‫‪File‬‬ ‫‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪View‬‬ ‫‪Insert‬‬ ‫‪Tools‬‬ ‫‪Window‬‬ ‫‪Help‬‬

‫‪ start -1‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫‪ file-2‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ edit-3‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﯽ‬
‫‪ view-4‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ insert-5‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ وﯾﮋﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬
‫‪ tools-6‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ window-7‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ help-8‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪)start‬ﺷﺮوﻉ (‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪1-infrastructure‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﮑﯽ ‪2-mechanical design‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ‪3-shape‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﯾﻪ و ﺗﺤﻠﯿﻞ و ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪4-analysis&simulation‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ‪5-AEC plant‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩی ‪6-NC manufacturing‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﺰﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ و ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ و ﺗﺤﻠﯿﻞ ﺩﯾﻨﺎﻣﯿﮑﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﺰﻡ ﻫﺎ ‪7-digital mock up‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ و ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ‪8-equipment & system‬‬
‫ﭘﺮوﺳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ‪9-digital process for manufacture‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺍﺭﮔﻮﻧﻮﻣﯽ و ﺗﺠﺰﯾﻪ و ﺗﺤﻠﯿﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪10-ergonomics design & analysis‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ‪11-knowledg ware‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﮑﯽ‬

‫‪6‬‬
1-part design ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
2-assembly design‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
3-sketcher ‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی‬
4-product functional tolerance & annotation
5-weld design ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺟﻮﺷﮑﺎﺭی‬
6-mold tooling design
7-structure design ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
8-2d layout for 3d design ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
9-drafting ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
10-core and cavity design
11-healing asistant
12-functiona molded part
13-sheet metal design ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ وﺭﻕ ﮐﺎﺭی‬
14-aerospace sheet metal design‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ وﺭﻕ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ و ﻫﻮﺍﻧﻮﺭﺩی‬
15- sheet metal production ‫ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪﺍﺕ وﺭﻕ ﮐﺎﺭی‬
16- composite ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻮﺯﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
17-wire frame and surface design ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی و ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ‬
18-generative sheet metal design ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ وﺭﻕ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
19- functional tolerance & annotation

(‫ )ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‬File ‫ﻣﻨﻮی‬

1-new ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
2-new from ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
3-open ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
4-close ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
5-save ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی‬

7
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ وﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪6-save as‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‪7-save all‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﺎوﯾﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪8-save manage ment‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪9-print‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ‪10-print setup‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ‪11-desk‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ‪12-send to‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪13-‬‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪14-exit‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی‪) edit‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﯽ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‪1-undo‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪2-repeat‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭوﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ‪3-update‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪4-cut‬‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪5-copy‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪6-paste‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪7-paste special‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪8-delete‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪9-search‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪10-selections sets‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪11- selections sets edition‬‬
‫ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪12-find owning selection set‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪13-links‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪14-properties.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ و ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‪15-other selection‬‬
‫‪16-scan or define in work object‬‬

‫‪8‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻨﻮی‪) view‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﯾﺪ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ و ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ ‪1-toolbars‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪2-commands list‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ وﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ‪3-geometry‬‬
‫)‪ f3‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ(ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ) ‪4-specifications‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ وﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪5-compass‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ وﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎوﺱ و ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪6-reset compass‬‬
‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩوﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ و ﯾﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ‪7-tree expansion‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ‪8-specifications overview‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺗﺮ )ﻫﻢ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ و ﻫﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ‪9-geometry overview‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ (‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ‪10-fit all in‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ‪11-zoom area‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ وﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪12-zoom in out‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ‪13-pan‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ‪14-rotate‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺩوﺭﺑﯿﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ‪15-modify‬‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺩﯾﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺑﺎﻻ‪-‬ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‪-‬ﭼﭗ‪-‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪-‬ﺟﻠﻮ‪-‬ﻋﻘﺐ –ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ و‪16-named views(...‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯی) ﺳﺎﯾﻪ – ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ و ﺑﺪوﻥ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﯿﻘﻠﯽ ‪17-render style -‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ و ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺪﯾﺪ –ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﯿﻤﯽ – ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺖ ﮔﺮی‪18-navigation‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯی ‪19-lightining‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﭘﺬﯾﺮی ‪20-depth effect‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ‪21-ground‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺭﻩ ﺑﯿﻦ ‪22-magnifier‬‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ و ﯾﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ )ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ (‪23-hide/show‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺪوﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ و ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ‪24-full screen‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی‪) tools‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ(‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ‪1-formula‬‬

‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ وﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ) ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ و ﻓﯿﻠﻢ وﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪2-image‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ و وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﺎﮐﺮوﻫﺎ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩ(‪3-macro‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ‪4-customize‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ‪5-visualization filters‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪6-options‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ‪7-conferencing‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪8-utility‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) window‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ(‬

‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻨﺪ ‪1-new window‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ‪2-tile horizontally‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ‪3-tile vertically‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺑﺸﺎﺭی ‪4-cascade‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) help‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ(‬

‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪1-catia v5 help‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺮی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪2-catia user companion‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ و ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪3-contents,index and search‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﻤﮏ ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﭼﯿﺴﺖ ؟ ?‪4-what is this‬‬
‫‪5-user galaxy‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﺟﺎﺭی ‪6-about catia v5‬‬

‫‪10‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ)‪(tools bar‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺠﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩو ﺑﺨﺶ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪، standard ، view‬‬
‫‪ knowledgeware‬و‪graphic properties‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی وﯾﮋﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ و ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ و ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ view‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ tools bar‬ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ و ﺍﮔﺮ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ(ﺭوی ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ و ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪(standard‬‬

‫‪ : New‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬

‫‪ : Open‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫‪ : Save‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫‪ : Print‬ﭼﺎپ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫‪ : Cut‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫‪ :Copy‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ : Paste‬ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ : Undo‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ :Repeat‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ?‪what is this‬‬

‫‪11‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﯾﺪ)‪(view‬‬

‫ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺘﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ‪fly‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )ﭼﭗ‪-‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪-‬ﺑﺎﻻ‪-‬ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‪-‬ﺟﻠﻮ‪-‬ﻋﻘﺐ‪-‬ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯی‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ) ‪(graphic properties‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﺪﺭی )ﺷﻔﺎﻓﯿﺖ(‬
‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻻﯾﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬

‫‪12‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ)‪(knowledgeware‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺟﺪوﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﯽ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ‬
‫‪...‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‪tree‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ و ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﯽ وﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ و ﺍﺯ ﺭوی ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍوﻝ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﻫﺮ وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﯽ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ و ﺳﺮﯾﻌﺎً ﺑﺮوﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ وﺍﺭﺩﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ و وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻥ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ وﯾﺎ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ و ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻣﯿﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺭوی ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩو ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ctrl‬و ﮐﻠﯿﺪ وﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ و ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪Sketch design‬‬

‫‪14‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﯿﮏ ‪sketch‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ وﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮوﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ PART‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻮﭘﺮ و ﯾﺎ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪:sketch‬‬
‫‪sketcher‬‬ ‫‪mechanical design‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻣﻨﻮی ‪start‬‬
‫‪sketcher‬‬ ‫‪part design‬‬ ‫‪mechanical design‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻨﻮی ‪start‬‬
‫ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮوﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪:sketch‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ workbench‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪exit workbench‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ start‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ mechanical design‬و وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪sketch‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ‪ sketch‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ part‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ save‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ file‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .catpart‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ) ‪( profiles‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺭوی ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ )‪(Operation‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﻗﯿﻮﺩ )‪(constrains‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Insert‬وﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ )‪(Sketch Tools‬‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩو ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﯾﺮﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ )‪ ، (grid‬ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﯽ)‪ ، (snap‬ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﯾﺎ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ )‪(construction/standard element‬وﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬
‫)‪(geometrical constraints ,dimensional constraints‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ H‬و ‪V‬‬
‫وﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻼوﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ H‬و ‪ ، V‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ و ﯾﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ ً ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ و ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ و ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﻋﻼوﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻃﻮﻝ و ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-1‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ) ‪( profiles‬‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ profile-1‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ predefined profile -2‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﺮوﻑ )ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ‪-‬ﺷﺶ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ‪-‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ –ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ (‬
‫‪ circle-3‬ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ conic-4‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﯽ‬
‫‪ spline-5‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ line-6‬ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ axis-7‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ point-8‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ profile‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ و ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍوﻟﯿﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ line-1‬ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍوﻟﯿﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎوﺱ ﺭوی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪sketch‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ H,V‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی و ﯾﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ وﯾﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ tangent arc-2‬ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻤﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ وﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ sketch‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ three point arc -3‬ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮوﻉ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﻤﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺩوﻡ و ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭوی ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩ و ﯾﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮوﻉ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ ‪ .‬و ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺭوی ﺍوﻟﯿﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ و ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﯿﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ predefined profile‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﺮوﻑ‬

‫ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ rectangle -1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ oriented rectangle -2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ parallelogram-3‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ‬
‫‪ elongated hole-4‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ cylindrical elongated hole -5‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ ﮐﻤﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ keyhole profile-6‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ hexagon-7‬ﺷﺶ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ‬
‫‪ centered rectangle -8‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬

‫‪17‬‬
 ‫‪centered parallelogram -9‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬

‫‪ rectangle -1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ و ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ h,v‬ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﺍوﻝ و ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ و ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ oriented rectangle -2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍوﻝ ﯾﮏ ﺿﻠﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻠﻊ) ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ h,v‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻠﻊ وﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ( و ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ) ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪h,v‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﯾﮕﺮوﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ (‬

‫‪ parallelogram-3‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍوﻝ ﯾﮏ ﺿﻠﻊ ) ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪ h,v‬ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍوﻝ وﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ وﯾﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾـﻪ ﺁﻥ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺿـﻠﻊ ) ﯾـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐـﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪h,v‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍوﻝ وﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ وﯾﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺁﻥ( و ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ) ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐـﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪h,v‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﯾﮕﺮوﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ و ﯾﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺁﻥ (‬

‫‪ elongated hole-4‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﮐـﺰ ﺍوﻝ ﺳـﻮﺭﺍﺥ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍی ﺟﻬـﺖ ﻣﺮﮐـﺰ ﺩوﻡ ﺳـﻮﺭﺍﺥ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐـﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ‪ h,v‬ﺩﺭ ﻫـﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠـﻪ و ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ(‬

‫‪ cylindrical elongated hole -5‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ ﮐﻤﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ ﮐﻤﺎﻧﯽ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ‪،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺍوﻝ ﺳـﻮﺭﺍﺥ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ h,v‬و ﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩوﻡ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ h,v‬وﯾﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ(‬

‫‪18‬‬
 ‫‪ keyhole profile-6‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳـﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺑـﺰﺭگ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﮐـﺰ ﺳـﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﻮﭼـﮏ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍی ﮐـﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﻣﺮﮐـﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺑﺰﺭگ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ hexagon-7‬ﺷﺶ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺶ ﺿﻠﻌﯽ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺁﻥ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪).‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪sketch‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ وﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺭﺍوﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪( .‬‬

‫‪ centered rectangle -8‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻌﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻮﺷـﻪ ﻣـﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ و ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪(.‬‬

‫‪ centered parallelogram -9‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﮐـﺰ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺧـﻂ ﺍوﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺧـﻂ ﺩوﻡ )ﺗﻘـﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﺩو ﺧـﻂ ﺑﻌﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﮐـﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﻫـﻢ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷـﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ و ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯی ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪(.‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ )‪(circle‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ و ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪-3‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ و ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ وﯾﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪-5‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪-6‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ و ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ و ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ وﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪-7‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ و ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ وﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫‪19‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ)‪(spline‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ‪spline‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ‪spline‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺑﻄﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩو‬

‫ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﯽ ) ‪(conic‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺑﯿﻀﯽ ‪ellipse‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﯿﻀﯽ – وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‪ -‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺳﻬﻤﯽ ‪parabola by focus‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪-focus‬ﺭﺍﺱ ‪– apex‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ –ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬
‫‪-3‬ﻫﺬﻟﻮﻟﯽ ‪hyperbola by focus‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪– focus‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ - center‬ﺭﺍﺱ ‪– apex‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ –ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺨﺮوﻁ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺮﺩی ‪conic‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ‪-‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‪3-‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ(‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ – ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﺮوﻉ‪-‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‪ -‬ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ(‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ و ﻣﻤﺎﺱ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ‪-‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‪-‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک –ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ(‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ و ﻣﻤﺎﺱ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ‪-‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﺮوﻉ ‪ -‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‪ -‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ – ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ(‬

‫ﺧﻂ)‪(line‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪line‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‪ -‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی –ﺧﻂ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺑﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﺖ ‪infinite line‬‬

‫‪20‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ‪ -‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی –ﺧﻂ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺩو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‪bi tangent line‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻧﯿﻤﺴﺎﺯ ﺩو ﺧﻂ ‪bi secting line‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‪line normal to curve‬‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ)‪(axis‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ skatcher‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍوﻝ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ)‪(point‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﻠﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪point by clicking‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ )ﺩﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻗﻄﺒﯽ( ‪point by using cordinates‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺧﻂ و ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺎوی و ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﯿﻨﯽ‪equidistant points‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﻞ و ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪points &length‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ و ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪points &spacing‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﻞ ‪spacing & length‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ‪intersection point‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻂ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭوی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ( ‪projection point‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺭوی ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ )‪(Operation‬‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺫﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ corner-1‬ﮔﺮﺩی ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ‪-‬ﺭﺍﮐﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ Chamfer-2‬ﭘﺦ‬
‫‪ Relimitetions-3‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪ Transformation-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 3d Geometry-5‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫‪21‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺩی ﮔﻮﺷﻪ –ﺭﺍﮐﻮﺭﺩ)‪(corner‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 6‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪trim all elements -1‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺩو ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫‪trim first element -2‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪ no trim -3‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪standard lines trim -4‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ)ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫‪construction lines trim -5‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﺩ ﺗﺎﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ) ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ (‬
‫‪ construction lines no trim -6‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺍوﻝ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺩوﻡ – ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ و ﯾﺎ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪sketch‬‬

‫ﭘﺦ )‪(Chamfer‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 6‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪trim all elements -1‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺩو ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫‪trim first element -2‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪no trim -3‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪standard lines trim -4‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ)ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫‪construction lines trim -5‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﺩ ﺗﺎﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ) ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ (‬
‫‪construction lines no trim -6‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺍوﻝ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺩوﻡ – ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﭘﺦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ و ﯾﺎ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺦ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﺭﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪: sketch‬‬
‫‪ angle and hypothenuse -7‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ و ﻃﻮﻝ وﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ first and second length -8‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍوﻝ و ﺩوﻡ ﭘﺦ‬
‫‪ angle and first length -9‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍوﻝ ﭘﺦ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﺳﺎﺯی‪Relimitations‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫‪) trim-1‬ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪) break-2‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ(ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭوی ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪) quick trim-3‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪) Break and rubber in‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﯽ (‬
‫ﺏ( ‪) Break and rubber out‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﯽ (‬
‫ﺝ( ‪) Break and keep‬ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻥ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ (‬
‫‪) close-4‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪) complements-5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﻤﻞ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ (‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪Transformation‬‬
‫‪)mirror -1‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی (‬
‫‪)symmetry-2‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺷﯽ (‬
‫‪)translate-3‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﻄﺮی ﺷﯽ(‬
‫‪)rotate-4‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺷﯽ (‬
‫‪)scale -5‬ﮐﻮﭼﮏ و ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ (‬
‫‪ )offset-6‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی(‬

‫‪)mirror‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی (‬
‫‪-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬

‫‪)symmetry‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺷﯽ (‬

‫‪-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬

‫‪)translate‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﻄﺮی ﺷﯽ(‬

‫‪23‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ instance-1‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ douplicate mode -2‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﻄﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ و ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪keep internal constraints-3‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ keep external constraints-4‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫‪ length(value)-5‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫‪ snap mode -6‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪)rotate‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺷﯽ (‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ instance-1‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ douplicate mode -2‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬و ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪constraints conservations-3‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ angle(value)-4‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫‪ snap mode -5‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ وﯾـﺎ ﮐﭙـﯽ ﺩﺍﯾـﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﮐـﺮﺩﻩ و ﺳـﭙﺲ ﻣﺮﮐـﺰ ﭼـﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﮐـﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫وﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ وﯾﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪)scale‬ﮐﻮﭼﮏ و ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ (‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺫﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ douplicate mode -2‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬و ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ و ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪conservation of the constraints-3‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ scale(value)-5‬ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ snap mode -6‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﯿﮏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ )offset‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ offset‬وﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪24‬‬
 ‫‪ no propagation-1‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ tangent propagation -2‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ point propagation -3‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ both side offset -4‬ﺩﺭﻫﺮ ﺩوﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ وﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ و ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 4‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ offset‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ instances‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3d Geometry‬ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﯾﮏ ‪ sketch‬ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 4‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺫﯾـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪project 3d elements-1‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭوی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪intersect 3d elements -2‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪project 3d silhouette edge -3‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻧﯿﻤﺮﺥ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺪوﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭوی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ isolate -4‬ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ وﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ و ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺭﻧـﮓ ﺯﺭﺩ ﻣـﯽ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﻣـﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺳـﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ و‬
‫ﺭوی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Smart pick‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ و ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮐﻠﯿﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﯾﻌﺎً ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻫﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪grid‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪sketch‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪-4‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ)‪(nearest endpoint‬‬
‫‪-5‬وﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ)‪(midpoint‬‬
‫‪-6‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﻀﯽ)‪(concentric‬‬
‫‪-7‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺭوی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬

‫‪25‬‬
 ‫‪-8‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﯽ ﺩو ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺍوﻝ –ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ctrl‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪-9‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫‪-10‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ و ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪-11‬ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﯿﻀﯽ و ‪ ...‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣـﯽ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧـﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﺷـﺪ ﻣـﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐـﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻄـﻮﺭ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ ﺧـﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﯿـﮏ ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﺭوی ﺧـﻂ ﯾﮑـﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩو ﮔﺰﯾﻨـﻪ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ‬
‫وﺳﻂ ) ‪(midpoint‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ وﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﯿــﮏ ﺭﺍﺳــﺖ ﺭوی ﺧــﻂ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨــﻪ ﭘــﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ )‪( parameters‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩو ﻗــﺴﻤﺖ ﻣــﯽ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﯾﮑــﯽ ﮐﭙــﯽ ﮐــﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤــﺎﻥ ﺧــﻂ‬
‫)‪ ( copy length‬و ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ )‪ (set as angle reference‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Smart pick‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ Smart pick‬ﻋﻼوﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ)‪(parallel‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ)‪(perpendicular‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ‪ -‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ )‪(tangent‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﺑﯿﻀﯽ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‪،‬ﮐﻤﺎﻥ و ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﻀﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ )‪(concentric‬‬

‫ﺍوﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ و ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪:‬‬

‫‪-1‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ)‪ (point‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ)‪(point‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ)‪ (point‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ)‪(extremity‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ)‪ (point‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺎﮐﯿﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻣﺜﻼً ‪midpoint‬ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ (‬
‫‪-4‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ )‪ (curve‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ )‪(curve‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ )‪ (horizontal‬و ﻋﻤﻮﺩی )‪(vertical‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯی )‪(parallel‬‬
‫‪-7‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ )‪(perpendicular‬‬

‫‪26‬‬
 ‫‪ -8‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ)‪ (point‬ﺑﻪ ﺭوی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ )‪ (curve‬ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪-9‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ )‪ (curve‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ )‪ (curve‬ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪-10‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ )‪(perpendicular‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-11‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی )‪ (vertical‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-12‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ )‪ (horizontal‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-3‬ﻗﯿﻮﺩ )‪(constrains‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﯾﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﯾﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 50‬ﺩﺍﺩﯾﻢ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ وﺩﺭ ﻫـﺮ ﺟﻬـﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺍﺩﯾﻢ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﺧـﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ‪ 10‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒـﺪﺍ ﺛﺎﺑـﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 10‬وﺩﺭ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ‪30‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﺯﺍﺩی ﻫﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿـﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﻢ ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬وﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻋﺪﺩی ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﯾﺖ)ﻗﯿـﺪ ( ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻣـﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩی)ﻃﻮﻝ –ﻋﺮﺽ‪ -‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ –ﺷﻌﺎﻉ و‪(...‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ )ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ –ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ –‬
‫ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪constraint‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻣﻨﻮی ‪insert‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪constraint‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪constraint defined in dialog box -1‬‬

‫‪27‬‬
 ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی‬
‫‪ constraint creation -2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ constraint‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭوی ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ وﯾﺎ ﻣﯿﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ contact constrain‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩی ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﯽ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی و ‪...‬‬
‫‪ auto constraint -3‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫‪ animate constraint -4‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ و ﺯوﺍﯾﺎ و ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬

‫‪ constraint defined in dialog box‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤـﺎﻥ ﻫـﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻗﯿـﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺷـﺪﻩ و ﻗﯿـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ (ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺭوی ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ length -1‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ radius/diameter -2‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﯾﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ fix-3‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ )ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ(‬
‫‪ horizontal-4‬ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ vertical-5‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ semimajor axis-6‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭوی ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﯿﻀﯽ‬
‫‪semiminor axis -7‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭوی ﻗﻄﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﯿﻀﯽ‬

‫ب (ﻣﻮاردی ﮐﻪ روی دو ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ coincidence -1‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ و ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩو ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻣﺜﻼً ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ و ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩو ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ(‬
‫‪ concentricity -2‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ )ﺩو ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺩو ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و‪(...‬‬
‫‪ tangencity-3‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ )ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﯾﺎ ﺩو ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ (‬
‫‪ parallelism-4‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ )ﺩو ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ(‬
‫‪ midpoint-5‬ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ و ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩو ﺑﻪ وﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ‬

‫‪28‬‬
 ‫‪ perpendicularity-6‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩو ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪distance -7‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫‪angle -8‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺝ (ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺭوی ﺳﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ symmetry -1‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ )ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ equidistant point -2‬ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ)ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﺎی‬
‫وﺍﺻﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺕ(ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ وﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ constraint creation -2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ constraint‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭوی ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ وﯾﺎ ﻣﯿﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﺧﻂ ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ و ﯾﮏ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬و ﯾـﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﮐﻠﯿـﮏ ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﯿـﺪ ﻣﻤﺎﺳـﯽ‬
‫)ﻗﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ(ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﯾﺎ ﺩو ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ(ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬و ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی )ﻗﯿﺪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩی ( ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻗﯽ و ﯾﺎ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﯽ )ﻗﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ(ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ contact constrain‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩی ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﯽ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی و ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﯾﺎ ﺩو ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی )ﻗﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ(ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ auto constraint‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﯿﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﯿﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩی و ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﯾﮏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺳﺮﯾﻌﺎً ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣـﯽ ﭘـﺬﯾﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﮐـﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪29‬‬
‫‪ elements to be constrained-1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭوی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﻧـﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ reference elements-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺩو ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ )ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ و ﻋﻤﻮﺩی وﯾﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ (‬
‫‪ symmetry lines -3‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ و ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻣـﺸﺨﺺ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﺑﺨـﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ animate constraint‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ و ﺯوﺍﯾﺎ و ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻃﻮﻝ و ﯾﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ animate constraint‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first value -1‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪ last value-2‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪ number of step-3‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫‪ actions-4‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ ) ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍوﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ–ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﺑﻪ ﺍوﻝ –ﻣﮑﺚ –ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ (‬
‫‪ options-5‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ )ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ –ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ و ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺍﻧﯿﻤﯿﺸﻦ‪-‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺪﺍوﻡ ﺭﻓﺖ و ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫–ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ و ﻣﺪﺍوﻡ‬
‫‪ hide constraints -6‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪skatcher‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketcher‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩو ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﯿﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽ و ﺍﺯ ﺩو ﺭوﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ و ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ properties‬و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ graphic‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ )‪ (colour‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )‪(line and curves‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺯﯾﺮﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪30‬‬
 ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺯﯾﺮﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮐـﻪ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﺍﺷـﯿﺎ ﯾـﮏ ﻣﻮﺿـﻮﻉ ﮐﻤﮑـﯽ ﺍﺳـﺖ و ﻓﻘـﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ‪ sketcher‬ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ و ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯی ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ و ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﺎوﺭ‬
‫ﻩ ﺍی و ﺗﯿﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ construction element‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺭﺩ ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺷﯿﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﯿـﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﺍﺷـﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﮐـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﺼﻮﯾﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﻣـﺪﻝ ﻫـﺎی ﺳـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪی‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺷﯿﺎ‬
‫‪-4‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻼً ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی ‪ :‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍوﯾﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ‪30‬و ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪40‬و وﺗﺮ ‪ 65‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-6‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻼً ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-7‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺭﻏﻮﺍﻧﯽ ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-8‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ و ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻞ ﺭوﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭوی ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ و ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Reconnect‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ و ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﻗﯿﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ و ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ و ﯾﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪Properties‬و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Active‬ﻗﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ و ‪ Deactive‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪part design‬‬

‫‪32‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ‪part design‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ‪ sketch‬و ﯾﺎ ‪ shape‬ﺑﺎﯾﺴﺘﯽ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫)‪ (part design‬ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪part design‬‬

‫‪part design‬‬ ‫‪mechanical design‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪start‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ part‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪new‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ‪file‬‬

‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ)ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ (part1‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪(.catpart‬‬ ‫‪save‬‬ ‫‪File‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪(.catpart‬‬ ‫‪open‬‬ ‫‪File‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ‪ sketcher‬ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ part‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketcher‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎً ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪ (.catpart‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪part design‬‬

‫‪ sketch- based -1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪ dress-up -2‬وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪surface -base -3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ transformation -4‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ و ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ reference elements -5‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪Boolean operations -6‬وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﻬﺎی ﺑﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫‪ constraints -7‬ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ annotation -8‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ )ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫‪33‬‬
 ‫‪ sketch- based‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ pad-1‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪drafted filleted pad -2‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ multi pad-3‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬
‫‪ pocket-4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ drafted filleted pocket -5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ multi pocket-6‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬
‫‪ shaft-7‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﻮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ groove-8‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻣﺪوﺭ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪ hole-9‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ rib-10‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ slot-11‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ stiffener-12‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ )ﺣﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺘﯽ ( ﺑﺮﺍی ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ loft-13‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪ removed lofted-14‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪ solid combine -15‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ pad‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪34‬‬
 ‫‪ first limit-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ type‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫‪ Dimension‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ‪ Length‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Up to next‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍوﻟﯿﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Up to last‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Up to plane‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ Up to surface‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ (‬
‫‪second limit-2‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ(‬
‫‪ profile/surface-3‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ thick-4‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ 8‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ mirror extent-5‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩو ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ reverse direction-6‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ direction-7‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ )ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ(ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ thin pad-8‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ thickness 1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ thickness 2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ nutral fiber‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ و ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ merge end‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﯾﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬

‫‪drafted filleted pad‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼوﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first limit-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Length‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬

‫‪35‬‬
 ‫‪second limit-2‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ(‬
‫‪ draft-3‬ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪Natural element‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ first limit‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ second limit‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪).‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ fillet -4‬ﮔﺮﺩی ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ lateral radius‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ first limit radius‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ second limit radius‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ reverse direction-5‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ ok – 6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ multi pad‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ و ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first limit-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Dimension‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Length‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪second limit-2‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ(‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Dimension‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Length‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ domains-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ direction-4‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ normal to sketch‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪reference‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬

‫‪36‬‬
 ‫‪ reverse direction-5‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ ok – 6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ pocket‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ pad‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯿﺮوﺩ و ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭو ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first limit-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ type‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫‪ Dimension‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ‪ depth‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫‪ Up to next‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍوﻟﯿﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Up to last‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Up to plane‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ Up to surface‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ (‬
‫‪second limit-2‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ(‬
‫‪ profile/surface-3‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ thick-4‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ 8‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ mirror extent-5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩو ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ reverse direction-6‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ direction-7‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ )ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ(ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ thin pad-8‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ thickness 1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ thickness 2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ nutral fiber‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ و ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ merge end‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﯾﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬

‫‪37‬‬
‫‪ drafted filleted pocket‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻬﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼوﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first limit-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ Length‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫‪second limit-2‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ(‬
‫‪ draft-3‬ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪Natural element‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ first limit‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ second limit‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪).‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ fillet -4‬ﮔﺮﺩی ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ lateral radius‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ first limit radius‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ second limit radius‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ reverse direction-5‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ ok – 6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ multi pocket‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ و ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first limit-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Dimension‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ depth‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ‬

‫‪38‬‬
 ‫‪second limit-2‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺩوﻡ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍوﻝ(‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Dimension‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ depth‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫‪ domains-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ direction-4‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ normal to sketch‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪reference‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ reverse direction-5‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ok – 6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ shaft‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﻮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭی ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ limits-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ first angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ second angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ profile/surfase -2‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Thick profile‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ )ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ (‬
‫‪ Reverse side‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ؟‬
‫‪ axis -3‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Reverse direction‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫‪ thin shaft-4‬ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ )ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ thickness 1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ thickness 2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ nutral fiber‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ وﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬

‫‪39‬‬
 ‫ﺩ( ‪ merge end‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ ok – 5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ groove‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻣﺪوﺭ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺍ ی ﻣﺪوﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ limits-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ first angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ second angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ profile/surfase -2‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Thick profile‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ )ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ (‬
‫‪ Reverse side‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ؟‬
‫‪ axis -3‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Reverse direction‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫‪ thin shaft-4‬ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ )ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ thickness 1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ thickness 2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ nutral fiber‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ وﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ merge end‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ ok – 5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ hole‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪40‬‬
 ‫‪ extension-1‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ type-2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ thread definition-3‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫‪ extension‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬

‫‪ -1‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ Blind‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ‪ Length‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ Up to next‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍوﻟﯿﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Up to last‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Up to plane‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ Up to surface‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ(‬
‫‪ diameter‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ Depth‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ Limit‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ Offset‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ‬
‫‪ direction-2‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ Reverse‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ‬
‫‪ Normal to surface‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫‪ Selection‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﯿﮏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ و ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ positioning sketch-3‬ﺑﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ و ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ bottom-4‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ Flat‬ﺗﺨﺖ‬
‫‪ V-bottom‬وی ﺷﮑﻞ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ – ﺩﺭﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪41‬‬
 ‫‪ type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ simple -1‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ tapered-2‬ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ counterboard-3‬ﺳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫‪ Diameter‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ Depth‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ countersunk-4‬ﺳﺮ ﺧﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ Mode‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪Depth& angle‬‬
‫‪Depth& diameter‬‬
‫‪angle & diameter‬‬
‫‪ Depth‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺧﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺧﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Diameter‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ counterdrilled-5‬ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ –ﺧﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ Diameter‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ Depth‬ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Anchor point‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 3‬و ‪ 5‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Extreme‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ Middle‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ و ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬

‫‪ thread definition‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫‪ threaded -1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ type-2‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ No standard‬ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ metric thin pitch‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﯾﺰ‬

‫‪42‬‬
 ‫‪ metric thick pitch‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ‬
‫‪ thread diameter -3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺭﺯوﻩ‬
‫‪ hole diameter -4‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ thread depth -5‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺭﺯوﻩ‬
‫‪ hole depth -6‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ pitch -7‬ﮔﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ right – threaded-8‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ left- threaded-9‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﭼﭙﮕﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ add -10‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ وﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ remove-11‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ok – 12‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ rib‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ و ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻣﺪﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ profile-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ center curve-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ profile control-3‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ Keep angle‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ‬
‫‪ Pulling direction‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Refrence surface‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪).‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی و ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی (‬
‫‪ merge rib.s ends-4‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ thick profile-5‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ thin rib-6‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ thickness 1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬

‫‪43‬‬
 ‫ﺏ( ‪ thickness 2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ nutral fiber‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ وﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ merge end‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ ok – 7‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ slot‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ و ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺭوی ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ profile-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ center curve-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ profile control-3‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ Keep angle‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ‬
‫‪ Pulling direction‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Refrence surface‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪).‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی و ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی (‬
‫‪ merge rib.s ends-4‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ thick profile-5‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ thin rib-6‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ thickness 1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ thickness 2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ nutral fiber‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ وﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ merge end‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ ok – 7‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ stiffener‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ )ﺣﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺘﯽ ( ﺑﺮﺍی ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺭوی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻘﻮﯾﺘﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪44‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ mode-1‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ From side‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫‪ From top‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪ thickness -2‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ thickness 1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ thickness 2‬ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ nutral fiber‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺯﺩوﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ Reverse direction -3‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ )ﺝ( ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ depth-4‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ‬
‫‪ Reverse direction‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﯿﻐﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺷﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ profile -5‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ Selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﯿﻐﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺧﻄﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok – 6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ loft‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ guides‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺴﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ(‪spine‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ وﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ(‪ coupling‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 4‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ratio-1‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪45‬‬
 ‫‪ tangency -2‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ tangency then curvature -3‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﯿﭽﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ vertices-4‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ relimitation‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﯾﺖ‬
‫‪ relimited on start section-1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍوﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪relimited on end section -2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺁﺧﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩوﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮوﻉ وﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ replace‬ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ‪ remove‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ و ‪ add‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ وﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ smooth parameters-4‬ﺻﯿﻘﻠﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ‪ angular correction‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ deviation‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫‪ ok – 5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ removed lofted‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ guides‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺴﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ(‪spine‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ وﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ(‪ coupling‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 4‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ratio-1‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ tangency -2‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬
‫‪ tangency then curvature -3‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺎﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﯿﭽﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ vertices-4‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ relimitation‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﯾﺖ‬
‫‪ relimited on start section-1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍوﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪relimited on end section -2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺁﺧﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩوﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮوﻉ وﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ replace‬ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ‪ remove‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ و ‪ add‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‬
‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ وﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ smooth parameters-4‬ﺻﯿﻘﻠﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ‪ angular correction‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ deviation‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫‪ ok – 5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ solid combine‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩو ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ وﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩو ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first component-1‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪ Profile‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ Notmal to profile‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ Direction‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﯿﮏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ second component-2‬ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ Profile‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬
‫‪ Notmal to profile‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬

‫‪47‬‬
‫‪ Direction‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﯿﮏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok – 3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ dress-up‬وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ edge fillet-1‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ edge fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ variable fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ face-face fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ tritangent fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ )ﻣﻤﺎﺳﯽ(‬
‫‪ chamfer-2‬ﭘﺦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫‪ draft-3‬ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ draft angle‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ draft reflect line‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﯿﺐ وﺑﺎﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺝ(‪variable draft‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ shell-4‬ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ thickness-5‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫‪ thread/tap-6‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﯾﺎ ﺭوی ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ remove face -7‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ remove face‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪replace face‬ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺳﻄﺢ‬

‫‪48‬‬
 ‫‪ edge fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ edge fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺭوی ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ edge fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ radius-1‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮔﺮﺩی‬
‫‪ object to fillet-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ‬
‫‪propagation-3‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ minimal‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ tangency‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ trim ribbon-4‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ tangency‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺮﺩی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ edges to keep-5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺠﺎوﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ limiting to elements-6‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ blend corners-7‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺿﺎﯾﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ setback distance-8‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ok – 9‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫ﺏ( ‪ variable fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺭوی ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﯾﮑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬
‫ﯾﺎﺑﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ edge fillet 9‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ points-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ و ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﮑﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ points‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ variation-2‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬

‫‪49‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ cubic‬ﻏﯿﺮ ﺧﻄﯽ )ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻪ(‬
‫ﺏ(‪ linear‬ﺧﻄﯽ‬
‫‪ circle fillet -3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ‪ spine‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ spine-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ‪spine‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭوی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ و ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ( ‪ face-face fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩوﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺪﻝ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ radius-1‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮔﺮﺩی‬
‫‪ faces to fillet-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ limiting to elements-3‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ hold curve-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭوی ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺑﺠﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮔﺮﺩی‬
‫‪ spine-5‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ‪spine‬‬
‫‪ ok -6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫ﺩ( ‪ tritangent fillet‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ )ﻣﻤﺎﺳﯽ(‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ faces to fillet-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯿﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ face to rermove-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ و ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩی‬
‫‪ limiting to elements-3‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﮔﺮﺩی ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪50‬‬
 ‫‪ chamfer‬ﭘﺦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺭوی ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﭘﺦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ mode-1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ length1/angle‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍوﻝ وﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭘﺦ‬
‫‪ Length1‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍوﻝ ﭘﺦ‬
‫‪ Angle‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ length1/length2‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍوﻝ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ Length1‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍوﻝ ﭘﺦ‬
‫‪ Length2‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩوﻡ ﭘﺦ‬
‫‪ objects to chamfer-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ propagation -3‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ minimal‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ(‪ tangency‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ reverse-4‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺦ‬
‫‪ ok -5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ draft-3‬ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ draft angle‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﺭوی ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﭘﺦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ draft type-1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ constant‬ﺷﯿﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ variable‬ﺷﯿﺐ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬
‫‪ angle -2‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ faces to draft-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪51‬‬
‫‪ selection by neutral face-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ و‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ neutral element -5‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺧﻨﺜﯽ)ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ وﺟﻮﻩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ propagation‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ None‬ﺑﺪوﻥ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ Smooth‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ وﺟﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﯽ‬
‫‪ pulling direction-6‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻤﯿﺪﮔﯽ وﺟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ وﺟﻮﻩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ pulling direction‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻤﯿﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫‪ Controlled by reference‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ‬
‫‪ parting element-7‬ﺟﺰء ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ Parting= neutral‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﯽ‬
‫‪ Draft both sides‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩو ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ define parting element‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ وﺟﻬﯽ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪limiting elements-8‬‬
‫‪ draft form-9‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ cone‬ﺧﻄﯽ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ square‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ ok -10‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫ﺏ(‪ draft reflect line‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﯿﺐ وﺑﺎﺯﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﻮﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ angle -1‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﯿﺐ‬

‫‪52‬‬
 ‫‪ faces to draft-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺭﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ pulling direction-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻤﯿﺪﮔﯽ وﺟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ وﺟﻮﻩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﯿﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻨﺠﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ pulling direction‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻤﯿﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫‪ Controlled by reference‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ‬
‫‪ parting element-4‬ﺟﺰء ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ define parting element‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ وﺟﻬﯽ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ limiting elements-5‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ وﺟﻬﯽ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺷﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ ok -6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫ﺝ( ‪variable draft‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﺭﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﯿﺒﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ draft angle‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫)‪ ( faces to draft‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) points‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻨﺜﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪) ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻨﻔﺶ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ و ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻢ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﺎﻃﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭوی ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‬
‫‪.‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ shell‬ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﯾﮏ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﯾﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ default inside thickness-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ default outside thickness -2‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ faces to remove-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪).‬ﺩﯾﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ other thickness faces-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫‪ 1‬و ‪ 2‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ ok-5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪53‬‬
 ‫‪ thickness‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ default thickness-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ default thickness faces -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ other thickness faces-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ 1‬و‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ ok-5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ thread/tap‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﯾﺎ ﺭوی ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ وﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ lateral face-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ (‬
‫‪ limit face-2‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺭﺯوﻩ‬
‫‪ reverse direction -3‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫‪ type-2‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ No standard‬ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ metric thin pitch‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﯾﺰ‬
‫‪ metric thick pitch‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ‬
‫‪ thread diameter -3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺭﺯوﻩ‬
‫‪ support diameter -4‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ thread depth -5‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺭﺯوﻩ‬
‫‪ support depth -6‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫‪ pitch -7‬ﮔﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ right – threaded-8‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ left- threaded-9‬ﺭﺯوﻩ ﭼﭙﮕﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ add -10‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ وﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬

‫‪54‬‬
 ‫‪ remove-11‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ok – 12‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ remove face‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ remove face‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ و ﻣﺪﻝ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺦ ﻫﺎ و ﮔﺮﺩی‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ faces to remove-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ faces to keep-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ show all faces to remove -3‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪replace face‬ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ replacing surfac -1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫‪ face to remove -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪surface -base‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ split-1‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﯾﺎ ﺭوﯾﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی(‬
‫‪ thick surface-2‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی وﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ close surface-3‬ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﭘﺮ‬
‫‪ sew surface-4‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﯾﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬

‫‪55‬‬
 ‫‪ split‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ)ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪ ،plane‬ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ face‬و ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﺭوﯾﻪ ‪ (surface‬و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ وﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ وﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻓﻠﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ thick surface‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی وﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first offset-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ second offset-2‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ object to offset-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ reverse direction -4‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ ok-5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ close surface‬ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﭘﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ first offset-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ second offset-2‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ object to offset-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ reverse direction -4‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ ok-5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ sew surface‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩوﺧﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ و ﯾﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪56‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ object to sew -1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ faces to remove-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ intersect to body-3‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭوﯾﻪ و ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ simplify geometry -4‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ ok-5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺭوﯾﻪ )‪(surface‬و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ وﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ وﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ transformation‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ و ﮐﭙﯽ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ translation-1‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ rotation-2‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ symmetry-3‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺷﯽ‬
‫‪ mirror-4‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺪوﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺷﯽ‬
‫‪ rectangular pattern-5‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﻄﺮی ﯾﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ circular pattern-6‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ user pattern-7‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺪﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ scaling -8‬ﺑﺰﺭگ و ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫‪ translation‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ vector definition-1‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ direction,distance‬ﺟﻬﺖ و ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫‪ Direction‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ‬

‫‪57‬‬
 ‫‪ Distance‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ point to point‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ Start point‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ‬
‫‪ End point‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ cordinates‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ X‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪x‬‬
‫‪ Y‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪y‬‬
‫‪ Z‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪z‬‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ rotation‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ axis-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺩوﺍﺭ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ و ﯾﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ angle-2‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ symmetry‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Reference-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫‪ ok -2‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ mirror‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺪوﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺷﯽ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ mirror element -1‬ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪58‬‬
 ‫‪ object to mirror-2‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ rectangular pattern‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﻄﺮی ﯾﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺳﻄﺮی –ﺳﺘﻮﻧﯽ )ﻣﺎﺗﺮﯾﺴﯽ(ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ first direction‬ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺍوﻝ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪-1‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Instances & spacing‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ instances‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫‪Instances‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﻞ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪Instances & lengh‬‬
‫‪ Instances‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ lengh‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ spacing & lengh‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﻞ‬
‫‪ lengh‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪spacing‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ reference directiom-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Reference element‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫‪ reverse -3‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ و ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ object to pattern-4‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Object‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Keep specifications‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ second direction‬ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺩوﻡ ﮐﭙﯽ )ﺩﻗﯿﻘﺎً ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻒ(‬
‫ﺝ(‪ position of object to pattern‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺍوﻝ ﯾﺎ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ Row in direction 1‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺍوﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ؟)ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ(‬
‫‪ Row in direction 2‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺩوﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ(‬

‫‪59‬‬
 ‫‪ rotation angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪ Pattern representation‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﻄﺮ وﺳﺘﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ Simplified representation‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩو ﺳﻄﺮ و ﺩو ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ؟‬
‫‪ Ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ circular pattern‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ (‪ axial reference‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ parameters‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ instances & angular spacing‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ و ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺏ ( ‪ instances & total angle‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ و ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﮐﻞ‬
‫ﺝ ( ‪ angular spacing & total angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ و ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﮐﻞ‬
‫ﺩ (‪ complete crown‬ﯾﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ )‪ 360‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻩ ( ‪ instances & unequal angular spacing‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ و ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ Instances‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ angular spacing‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫‪ total angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﮐﻞ‬

‫ﺏ( ‪ crown definition‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺷﻌﺎﻋﯽ‬

‫‪ Parameters‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ circles & crown thickness‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺏ ( ‪ circles & circle spacing‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ و ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺝ ( ‪ circle spacing & crown thickness‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻬﺎ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ Circles‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ circle spacing‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ crown thickness‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬

‫‪60‬‬
 ‫ﺝ( ‪ object to pattern‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Object‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Keep specifications‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬

‫ﺩ(‪ position of object in pattern‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺍوﻝ ﯾﺎ ﺩوﻡ‬

‫‪ Row in angular direction 1‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ؟)ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ(‬
‫‪ Row in radial direction 2‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺷﻌﺎﻋﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ(‬
‫‪ rotation angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺩﯾﻒ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫ﻩ(‪ rotations of instances‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ Radial alignment of instances‬ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺭوی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬

‫و( ‪ Pattern representation‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﻄﺮ وﺳﺘﻮﻧﯽ‬

‫‪ Simplified representation‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩو ﺳﻄﺮ و ﺩو ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ؟‬
‫‪ Ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ user pattern‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ instances -1‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ Positions‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Number‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ object to pattern-2‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Object‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ Anchor‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﮐﭙﯽ و ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﮐﭙﯽ ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Keep specifications -3‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬

‫‪61‬‬
 ‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ point‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﺍﺳﭙﺲ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺍﯾﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ scaling‬ﺑﺰﺭگ و ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ reference-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ ratio-2‬ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﺑﺰﺭگ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺪﻝ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ و ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ وﻟﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﯾﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ وﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ و ﯾﺎﺑﺰﺭگ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ reference elements‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ و ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ –ﺧﻂ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ و ‪. ...‬‬
‫‪ reference elements‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ point -1‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ line -2‬ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ plane-3‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫‪62‬‬
 ‫‪ point‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ point type -1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ Cordinate‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ On curve‬ﺭوی ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ On plane‬ﺭوی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ On surface‬ﺭوی ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪ Circle center‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ Tangent on curve‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺭوی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ Between‬ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ line‬ﺧﻂ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ line type -1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ Point - point‬ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ Point-direction‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ و ﯾﮏ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫‪ Angle normal to curve‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ Tangent to curve‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ Normal to surface‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪ Bisecting‬ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﯿﻤﺴﺎﺯ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪63‬‬
 ‫‪ plane‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی )‪ (plane‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ‪ xy,yz,zx‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺩو ﺑﻌﺪی ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭوی ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ و ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type -1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ Offset from plane‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ Parralel through point‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ Angle/normal to plane‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ Through three point‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ Through two lines‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩو ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ Through point & line‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ و ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ Through planer curve‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫‪ normal to curve‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ Tangent to surface‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪ Equation‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‬
‫‪ Mean through point‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ Offset from plane‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Offset from plane-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ reference-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ offset-3‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ reverse direction-4‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ repeat object after ok-5‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ok‬‬

‫‪64‬‬
 ‫‪ ok -6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ instances -7‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬

‫‪ Parralel through point‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Parralel through point-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ reference-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ point-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ و ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ Angle/normal to plane‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Angle/normal to plane-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ ratarion axis-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫‪ reference-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ angle-4‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ normal to plane-4‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ repeat object after ok-5‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ok‬‬
‫‪ ok -6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ instances -7‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Through three point‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Through three point-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ point 1-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪ point 2-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ point 3-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ ok -5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪65‬‬
 ‫‪ Through two lines‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩو ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Through two lines-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩو ﺧﻂ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ line 1-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪ line 2-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ forbid non coplanar lines-4‬ﻫﺮ ﺩو ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ Through point & line‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ و ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Through point & line-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ و ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ point-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪line -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ Through planer curve‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Through planer curve-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫‪ curve -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ)ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی(‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ normal to curve‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - normal to curve-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ curve -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ)ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی(‬
‫‪ point -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ Tangent to surface‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Tangent to surface-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫‪66‬‬
 ‫‪ curve -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ)ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی(‬
‫‪ point -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ Equation‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Equation-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‬
‫‪ Ax+By+Cz=d -2‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ‪A‬‬
‫وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ‪B‬‬
‫وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ‪C‬‬
‫وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ‪D‬‬
‫‪ point -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ Normal to compass -4‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ Parallel to screen -5‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ Mean through point‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane type - Mean through point-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ –ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ pointS -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ)ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ(‬
‫‪ Remove -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ replace-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ ok -5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ‪ plane‬ﻣﯿﺎﻥ ﺩو ‪plane‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﯾﮑﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ replication‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪plane nv replication‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ shape‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪generative shape desgin‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ plane 1 -1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍوﻝ‬

‫‪67‬‬
 ‫‪ plane 2 -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ instances -3‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ reverse direction -4‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ create in a new body-5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ Boolean operations‬ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﻟﯽ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )‪ (body‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﯾﮑﭙﺎﺭﭼـﻪ ﮐـﺮﺩ ﯾـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫـﻢ ﮐـﻢ ﮐـﺮﺩ و ﯾـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩو ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁوﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺒﺮ ﺑﻮﻟﯽ )ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک و ‪ (...‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ insert‬ﺭوی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ body‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ )‪(body‬ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘـﯽ ﺍﯾﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺯﯾﺮ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻂ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ‪ ، body‬ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ define in work object‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﻟﯽ ‪Boolean operations‬‬

‫‪ assemble-1‬ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺩو ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫‪ add-2‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ remove-3‬ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ intersect-4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺩو ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ union trim-5‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ remove lump-6‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻗﯿﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪boolean‬‬

‫‪ assemble‬ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺩو ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ assemble-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬

‫‪68‬‬
 ‫‪ to-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ after-3‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ok-4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ add‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ add-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬
‫‪ to-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ after-3‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ok-4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ remove‬ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ remove-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬
‫‪ to-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ after-3‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ok-4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ intersect‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺩو ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ intersect-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬
‫‪ to-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ after-3‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ok-4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ union trim‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ trim-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬
‫‪ with-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ faces to remove-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ faces to keep -4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪69‬‬
 ‫‪ ok-5‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ remove lump‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻗﯿﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪boolean‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ trim-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ faces to remove-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ faces to keep -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok-4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ constraints‬ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺩو ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺒﯿﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ ‪ fix/unfix :‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ tangency-‬ﻣﻤﺎﺳﯽ –‪ coincidence‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ parallelism-‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯی‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ perpendicularity-‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ distance :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ –‪ length‬ﻃﻮﻝ‪ angle-‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩو ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Constraints Defined in Dialog Box -1‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ Constraint-2‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬

‫‪ annotation‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ )ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﯾﺎﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ text with leader -1‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ flag note with Leader -2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ browse‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
Assembly design

71
 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ‪Assembly design‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ ، PART‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬
‫‪ ASSEMBLY‬ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪Assembly design‬‬

‫‪Assembly design‬‬ ‫‪mechanical design‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪start‬‬
‫‪product‬‬ ‫‪new‬‬ ‫ﺏ(‪file‬‬

‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ)ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ (product1‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪(.catproduct‬‬ ‫‪save‬‬ ‫‪File‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪ (.asm‬ﯾﺎ )‪(.catproduct‬‬ ‫‪open‬‬ ‫‪File‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭوﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺳـﺮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤـﺎﺕ ﺍوﻟﯿـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺑـﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ ﻣـﺴﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪assembly design‬‬ ‫‪mechanica design‬‬ ‫‪options‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪tools‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ update‬وﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪automatic‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ )‪(assembly‬‬

‫‪ product stracture tools-1‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ constraint-2‬ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ move -3‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ assembly features -4‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ space analysis-5‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬

‫‪72‬‬
 ‫‪ annotations-6‬ﯾﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫‪ creat scence-7‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ product stracture tools‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬

‫‪ new component-1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‬

‫‪ new product-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ new part-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ existing component-4‬ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ وﯾﺎ ‪...‬‬
‫‪ existing component with positioning -5‬ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ وﯾﺎ ‪ ...‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫‪ replace component-6‬ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ graph tree reordering-7‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ generate numbering-8‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺮوﻑ‬
‫‪ selective load-9‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ manage representations-10‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ fast multi instantiation-11‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬

‫‪ new component‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ‪ product‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ‪ product‬ﺟﺪﯾﺪ )ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی( ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ new product‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ‪ product‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ‪ product‬ﺟﺪﯾﺪ )ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی( ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ save manage‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪73‬‬
 ‫‪ new part‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ‬
‫‪ product‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ existing component‬ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ وﯾﺎ ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ‪ product‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﺎی ‪ catproduct ، catpart‬و ‪ cgr‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺴﯿﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ وﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯿﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ existing component with positioning‬ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ وﯾـﺎ ‪ ...‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﯾﺠـﺎﺩ ﻗﯿـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯿﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ replace component‬ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ graph tree reordering‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ‪ product‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ وﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ up‬ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ down ،‬ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ و ‪ selected‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ product‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ generate numbering‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺮوﻑ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی )‪ product‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ (ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ mode-1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬

‫‪74‬‬
 ‫‪ Integer‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ Letters‬ﺣﺮوﻑ‬
‫‪ existing numbers-2‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ Keep‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ Replace‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ ok -3‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬و ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ insert ,‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ generation‬و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ baloon generation‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ selective load‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ hide‬ﯾﺎ ‪ show‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ و ﯾﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ manage representations‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی )‪ product‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ (ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ associate‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ select‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍوﻝ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ وﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫و ﻓﻌﺎﻝ و ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ …‪stp , sgl , asm , slp,‬‬
‫‪ fast multi instantiation‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩو ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﮑﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ و ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﭙﯽ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ component to instantiate-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ parameters-2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ Instances & Spacing‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ Instances & Length‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﻞ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ Spacing & Length‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﻞ‬
‫‪ New Instances‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ Spacing‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬

‫‪75‬‬
 ‫‪ Length‬ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ reference direction -3‬ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫‪ Axis‬ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ی ‪ x‬ﯾﺎ ‪ y‬ﯾﺎ ‪z‬‬
‫‪ Or selected element‬ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻟﺒﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪ reverse-4‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ result -5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪ define as default -6‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ و ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok -7‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ‪constrain‬‬

‫•ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ و ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ coincidence-1‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫‪ contact-2‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ offset-3‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﯿﻦ‬
‫‪ angle-4‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ fix component-5‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ fix to gether -6‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
‫‪ quick constraint-7‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‬
‫‪ flexible rigid sub assembly -8‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬
‫‪ change constraint -9‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ re use pattern -10‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ coincidence‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ‬

‫‪76‬‬
 ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ وﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ وﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫ﺩو ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ و ﯾﺎ ﺩوﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺤﺪﺍﻟﻤﺮﮐﺰ و ﯾﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍوﻝ )ﺣﺮﮐﺖ(ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩوﻡ )ﺛﺎﺑﺖ (ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ contact‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﯿﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو وﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ وﯾﺎ وﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ وﯾﺎ وﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬

‫‪ offset‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﯿﻦ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ وﯾﺎ وﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ وﯾﺎ وﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ Supporting elements‬وﺟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Orientation‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ)‪ undefined‬ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ –‪ same‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﻄﺒـﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ‪ opposite-‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻢ (‬
‫‪offset‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ‬
‫‪ Ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ angle‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬

‫‪77‬‬
 ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ وﯾﺎ وﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ وﯾﺎ وﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﯿﺪ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ Supporting elements‬وﺟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Perpendicularity‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩو وﺟﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪Parallelism‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩو وﺟﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو وﺟﻪ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Sector‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ Angle‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪-ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ fix component‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬

‫‪ fix to gether‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﯿﺪ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ Components‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ quick constraint‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍوﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ‪ options‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩوﻡ‬

‫‪78‬‬
 ‫‪ flexible rigid sub assembly‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﮐﻠﯽ ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘـﺎژ ‪ ،‬ﮐـﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎﺯ و ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﮐـﺖ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ‪ flexible rigid‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ change constraint‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻗﯿﻮﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎﻫﯿﺖ ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ re use pattern‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ move‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺭوﺵ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪move‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪move‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ edit‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪move‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ)‪(move‬‬

‫‪ manipulation-1‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬

‫‪ snap -2‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﺮﺷﯽ‬
‫‪ explode-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ stop manipulation on clash -4‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬

‫‪79‬‬
 ‫‪ manipulation-1‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ و ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐـﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍوﻝ ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎی ‪ z – y – x‬ﯾﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩوﻡ ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ zx – yz – xy‬و ﯾﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ :‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎی ‪ z – y – x‬و ﯾﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ With respect to constraints‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ‬
‫‪-ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ snap -2‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﺮﺷﯽ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩو ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ snap-1‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﺮﺷﯽ‬
‫‪ smart move-2‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ Snap‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ و ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍوﻝ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ و ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩوﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍوﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩوﻡ ﭘﺮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ smart move‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ‪ snap‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻼوﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻗﯿﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ explode-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ depth-1‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪ First level‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ) ﺑﺪوﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪ All levels‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ )ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی(‬
‫‪ type -2‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ 3d‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 2d‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺭوی ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﯿﺮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪80‬‬
 ‫‪ costrained‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ scroll explode-3‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ applay‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ selection-4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی)ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪product‬‬
‫‪ fix product -5‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪applay -6‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ok -7‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ stop manipulation on clash -4‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ، manipulation‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩ و ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ assembly features‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬

‫‪ split-1‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬
‫‪ hole-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬
‫‪ pocket-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬
‫‪ remove-4‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬
‫‪ add-5‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬
‫‪ Symmetry‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬

‫‪ split‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ name‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺵ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ parts possibly affected‬ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪81‬‬
 ‫ﺝ( ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍوﻟﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺩوﻣﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﮑﯽ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻣﯽ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ و ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻣﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻈﺮ ﯾﮑﯽ ﯾﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺩ(‪ affected parts‬ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ‪ ok‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻩ( ‪ high light affected parts‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫و( ‪ ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ hole‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ و ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺩو ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﯾﮑﯽ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺭﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ و ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ split‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ)‪ (ok‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ pocket‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ new part‬ﯾﮏ ‪ part‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ و ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﺷﺪﻩ و‬
‫ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭوی ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪ ،‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺷﺪﻩ و‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭو ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ pocket‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ remove‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ‪ body‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ split‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ وﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ add‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ‪ body‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ split‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ وﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪82‬‬
 ‫‪ Symmetry‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ)‪ (plane‬ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫‪-2‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی وﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫‪-3‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی و ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪-4‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ و ﺭوی ‪ finish‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ space analysis‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﯽ ﻫﺎ و ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ clash-1‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ sectioning -2‬ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ distance and band analysis-3‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ clash‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ check clash‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ name-1‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ‪ application‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ type-2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ contact+clash‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ و ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ clearance+contact+clash‬ﻟﻘﯽ وﺗﻤﺎﺱ و ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ authorized penetration‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺩ(‪ clash rule‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻧﯿﺰ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ inside one selection‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ selection against all‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫‪83‬‬
 ‫ﺝ(‪ between all components‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺩ(‪ between two components‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩو ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫‪ filter-4‬ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ result window‬ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ export as-6‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﺎی ‪xml ,txt, model‬‬
‫‪ apply-7‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ sectioning‬ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩو ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ sectioning‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ definition-1‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬
‫‪ positioning-2‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ result-3‬ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ‬
‫‪ behavior-4‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫‪ definition-1‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬
‫‪ name-1‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺵ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ selection-2‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ section plane‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ section plane‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ section slice‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ section box‬ﺑﺮﺵ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻣﮑﻌﺐ‬
‫‪-4‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ volume cut‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﭗ(‬
‫‪ positioning-2‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ normal constraint-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻫﺎی ‪x,y,z‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ edit position and dimensions‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ و ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪84‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ origin‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ x,y,z‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ dimensions‬ﻃﻮﻝ و ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ translations‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺩ(‪ rotations‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﻩ( ‪ close‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ geometrical target‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ positioning by 2/3 selections‬ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺩو ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ invert normal‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﺠﺎی ﻃﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫‪-6‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ reset position‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ok-7‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ result-3‬ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ‬
‫ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ : export as‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪catpart‬‬
‫ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ edit grid‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ mode‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ absolute:‬ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ‪ relative -‬ﻧﺴﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ style‬ﺳﺒﮏ ‪ lines :‬ﺧﻄﯽ ‪ crosses -‬ﺻﻠﯿﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺝ(‪ steps‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪ width– automatic filtering :‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ –‪ height‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺩ(‪ default‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ results window‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ‬
‫‪ Options‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ section fill‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ clash detection‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ grid‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫‪ Ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ behavior-4‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬

‫‪85‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ manual update‬ﺑﻪ ﺭوﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ update‬ﺑﻪ ﺭوﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ section freeze‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺩ(‪ ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ distance and band analysis-3‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ‪ product‬ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ name-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ type-2‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬
‫‪ Minimum‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Along x‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪x‬‬
‫‪ Along y‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪y‬‬
‫‪ Along z‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪z‬‬
‫‪ Band analysis‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ )ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ و ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺏ(ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Between two selections‬ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ Inside one selection‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ selection against all‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ selection 1 -3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺍوﻝ‬
‫‪ selection 1 -4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺩوﻡ‬
‫‪ apply -5‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ وﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ accuracy -6‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪) selection result -7‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Show‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪86‬‬
 ‫‪ Hide‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ Transparent‬ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ok -7‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫‪ annotations-6‬ﯾﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﯾﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ weld feature -1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ text with leader-2‬ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫‪ flog note with leader-3‬ﯾﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ)ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ (‬
‫‪ weld feature‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ )ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻮﺵ (ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ field-weld symbol‬ﺟﻮﺷﮑﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ weld-all-around symbol‬ﺟﻮﺷﮑﺎﺭی ﺩوﺭﺗﺎ ﺩوﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ weld text side‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭوی ﺧﻂ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ indent line side‬ﺧﻂ ﭼﯿﻦ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ weld tail‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ size of weld-6‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺟﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ length of weld-7‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ reference-8‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭی‬
‫‪ import file -9‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭی ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪6‬و‪ 7‬وﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮوﺩ و ﮐﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ و ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭوی ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺰوﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪87‬‬
 ‫‪ text with leader‬ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ و ﯾﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺖ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩو ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﻓﻠﺶ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪symbol shape‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ flog note with leader‬ﯾﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ)ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ (‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍوﻻً ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ و ﺛﺎﻧﯿﺎً ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ و ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ و‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎً ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ )‪ (link‬ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ creat scene-7‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ)‪ (product‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ scene‬ﺩو ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ وﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ enhanced scene -1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ scenes browser-2‬ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ enhanced scene‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ name -1‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ automatic naming -2‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ overload mode-3‬ﺭوﺵ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ Partial‬ﺟﺰﺋﯽ‬
‫‪ Full‬ﮐﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ok-4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ enhanced scenes‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ explode-1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬

‫‪88‬‬
 ‫‪ save viewpoint -2‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﯾﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ overload positions-3‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫‪ overload positions‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫‪ Overload hide-show‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ و ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ overload graphic‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ‬
‫‪ overload node activation‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ apply scene on assembly -4‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ apply assembly on scene-5‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ exit scene-6‬ﺧﺮوﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ scenes browser‬ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺭوی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ application‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪89‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯾﯽ‬
‫‪Drafting‬‬

‫‪90‬‬
 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪drafting‬‬
‫وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪drafting‬‬
‫‪drafting‬‬ ‫‪mechanical design‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪start‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ drawing‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪new‬‬ ‫ﺏ(‪file‬‬

‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ)ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ (drawing1‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪(.catdrawing‬‬ ‫‪save‬‬ ‫‪File‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪(. Catdrawing‬‬ ‫‪open‬‬ ‫‪File‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ tools‬ﺭوی ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ grid‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪drafting‬‬ ‫‪mechanical design‬‬ ‫‪options‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﻣﻨﻮی ‪tools‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ‪disply‬‬ ‫‪grid‬‬ ‫‪General‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ وﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬

‫‪drafting‬‬ ‫‪mechanical design‬‬ ‫‪options‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪tools‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ view name‬و ‪scaling‬‬ ‫‪Layout‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ standard-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫‪91‬‬
 ‫‪ format-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ و ﯾﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ و ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ orientation-3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫‪ Portrait‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
‫‪ Landscape‬ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ sheets-4‬وﺭﻕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ sheets‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ Scale‬ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ hide when starting workbench-5‬ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ ok-6‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪drafting‬‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ insert‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭوی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ object-1‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪catia‬‬
‫‪ views-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ drawing-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ و ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫‪ dimensioning-4‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ generation -5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺭوﺵ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ و ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ annotations-6‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ و ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬
‫‪ dress-up-7‬وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫‪ geometry creation -8‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﯽ)ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪geometry modification -9‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ)‪(operation‬‬
‫‪ picture -10‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬

‫‪ object‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪catia‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ insert object‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻟﯿـﺴﺖ ﻧـﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎی ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐـﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﻣـﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ)‪ ، (paint‬ﺍﺗﻮﮐـﺪ )‪ (AutoCAD‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﻧـﺮﻡ ﺍﻓـﺰﺍﺭ ﻫـﺎ ﺷـﺪﻩ و ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ(ﺑـﺎ ﺑـﺴﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻧـﺮﻡ ﺍﻓـﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺷـﮑﻞ ﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘـﻞ و ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ create from file‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻧـﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎی ﻓـﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ views‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ projections-1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ sections-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ details-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ clippings-4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﯽ‬
‫‪ break view-5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ)ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻃـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ wizard -6‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ‪:‬ﺭوی ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﻠﯿـﮏ ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﮐـﺮﺩﻩ و ﮔﺰﯾﻨـﻪ ‪ properties‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺷـﺪﻥ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺭوی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ disply view frame‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ projections‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ front view‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ unfolded view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی وﺭﻕ ﮐﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ view from 3d‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ )ﺗﻠـﺮﺍﻧﺲ( ﺍﺯ ﯾـﮏ ﻣـﺪﻝ ﺳـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ projection‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو‬
‫ﻩ( ‪ auxiliary‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫و( ‪ isometric‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺯ( ‪ advanced front view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮوی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬

‫‪93‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ front view‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪front view‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ (.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪part‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺁﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳـﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﯾـﮏ ﺩﺍﯾـﺮﻩ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻓﻠﺶ ﺩﺍﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣـﯽ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺿـﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﻨـﺪی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤـﺎی ﺭوﺑـﺮو ﮐـﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺭوی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ و ﺗﺜﺒﯿﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﺿﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﻫـﺮ ﯾـﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿـﺪﻫﺎی ﻓﻠـﺶ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻫـﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭوی ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬و ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍی ﺍﯾـﻦ ﮐـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ open‬ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ part‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ و ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ drafting‬ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿـﺪ ‪.‬ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨـﻮی‬
‫‪ window‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ tile horizontally‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﻫـﺮ ﺩو ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ﺑﻄـﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘـﯽ ﮐﻨـﺎﺭ ﻫـﻢ ﭼﯿـﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ و ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ( ‪ unfolded view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی وﺭﻕ ﮐﺎﺭی‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sheet metal‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ‪drafting‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ و ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤـﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿـﺮ و ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻤـﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﮐـﻪ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤـﺎی ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی وﺳﻂ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ( ‪ view from 3d‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺷﯽ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪Functional Tolerancing and Annotation‬‬
‫ﺑــﺎ ﺍﺟــﺮﺍی ﺍﯾــﻦ ﺩﺳــﺘﻮﺭ و وﺭوﺩ ﺑــﻪ ﻣﺤــﯿﻂ ‪ Functional Tolerancing and Annotation‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨــﺎﺏ ﯾــﮏ‬
‫‪ section view‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ و ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻘﻄﻊ )‪ (section view‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪Functional Tolerancing and Annotation‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨــﻮی ‪ insert‬و ﮐﻠﯿــﮏ ﺭوی ‪ view\annotations plane‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨــﺎﺏ ‪section view\annotations‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪94‬‬
 ‫ﺩ( ‪ projection‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪projection‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﻧﻤﺎی ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ و ‪ active view‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻧﻤﺎی ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻩ( ‪ auxiliary‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬

‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﻼوﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺍی‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪auxiliary‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫و( ‪ isometric‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪isometric‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪part‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﯾﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻓﻠﺶ ﺩﺍﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺿﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﻨﺪی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ و ﺗﺜﺒﯿﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﺿﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻓﻠﺶ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭوی ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪95‬‬
 ‫ﺯ( ‪ advanced front view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ view‬ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ وﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ و ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ front view‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ assembly, part‬ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ وﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ sections‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ offset section view-‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی‬
‫ﺏ‪ aligned section view -‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺝ‪ offset section cut -‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی‬
‫ﺩ‪aligned section cut -‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ offset section view-‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی‬

‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺧﻂ ﺍوﻝ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪offset section view‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺭوی ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺭوی ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩو ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ و ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨـﻪ‬
‫‪ properties‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ aligned section view -‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ ‪).‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮔـﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ وﺭﻕ ﮐﺎﺭی (‬

‫ﺝ‪ offset section cut -‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺠﺎی ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺵ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ )ﺟﺎی ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﯿﻎ ﺍﺭﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪96‬‬
 ‫ﺩ‪aligned section cut -‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺠﺎی ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺵ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺵ )ﺟﺎی ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﯿﻎ ﺍﺭﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ details-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ detial view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ detial view profile‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ quick detial view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ quick detial view profile‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ detial view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ و ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔـﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﻗﯿـﻖ ﺗـﺮ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻘﯿـﺎﺱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷـﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪detial view‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿـﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤـﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻨﯿـﺪ و ﮐﻠﯿـﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍی ﺩﯾﮕـﺮ ﮐـﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍوﻝ ﺷـﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ detial view profile‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻒ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﮐﻠﯿـﮏ ﺭوی‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﮑﻞ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ( ‪ quick detial view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﯿـﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤـﺎﯾﯽ ﺟﺰﯾﯿـﺎﺕ ﻣـﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ( ‪ quick detial view profile‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣـﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪97‬‬
 ‫‪ clippings-4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﺮوﻥ ﻧﻤـﺎ ﺍﯾﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯿﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺻـﻠﯽ ﻣـﯽ ﻣﺎﻧـﺪ و ﺑﻘﯿـﻪ ﺷـﮑﻞ ﻧﻤـﺎی ﺍﺻـﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ clipping view -1‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﯽ‬
‫‪ clipping view profile -2‬ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ‬

‫‪ break view-5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩو ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ broken view -1‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ breakout view -2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﯽ‬
‫‪ broken view -1‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺭوی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ breakout view -2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ –ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑـﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺿـﻌﯽ ﺑﺪﻫﯿـﺪ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﭘﺎﯾـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧـﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄـﻊ ﺩوﺑـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺧﻂ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻧـﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ و ﺗﻨﻈـﯿﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿـﺖ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ و ‪ ok‬ﺑـﺮﺵ ﻣﻮﺿـﻌﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪98‬‬
 ‫‪ wizard -6‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﯾﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ wizard -1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ first config -2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍوﻟﯽ‬
‫‪second config -3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩوﻣﯽ‬
‫‪ third config -4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﻣﯽ‬

‫‪ wizard -1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ view wizard‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ next‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺎﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ preview‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ minimum distance between each view‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭوی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ finish‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-6‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ window‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی)‪ part‬ﯾﺎ ‪ assembly‬ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ( ﺷﺪﻩ و ﯾﮏ ﺳـﻄﺢ ﯾـﺎ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺟـﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺭوﺑﺮو ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ و ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤـﺎی ﺭوﺑـﺮو‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ first config -2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍوﻟﯽ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮ)‪ ، (front‬ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (top‬و ﭼﭗ )‪ (left‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪6‬و ‪ 7‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪second config -3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩوﻣﯽ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮ)‪ ، (front‬ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ )‪ (bottom‬و ﺭﺍﺳﺖ )‪ (right‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪99‬‬
 ‫‪ third config -4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻫـﺎی ﺟﻠـﻮ)‪ ، (front‬ﻋﻘـﺐ )‪ (rear‬ﺑـﺎﻻ )‪ ، (top‬ﭘـﺎﯾﯿﻦ )‪ ، (bottom‬ﭼـﭗ )‪ ، (left‬ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ )‪ (right‬و‬
‫ﺍﯾﺰوﻣﺘﺮﯾﮏ )‪( isometric‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ drawing-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ و ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤـﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ sheets -1‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ New sheet‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ New details sheet‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ New view-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ Instantiate 2D component-3‬ﺍﺟﻀﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ sheets‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ New sheet‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣـﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮐـﻪ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯﺍﯾـﻦ ﺻـﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑـﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ New details sheet‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰوﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭوﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ New view‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭوﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ . ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭوی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ‪ view‬ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Instantiate 2D component‬ﺍﺟﻀﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ وﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ 2D component‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ detail sheet‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪tools palette -1‬‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Scale‬ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ position -2‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫‪ Change component origin‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫‪ Change component origin‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫‪ flip component horizontally‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ flip component vertically‬ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬

‫‪ dimensioning-4‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 4‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ dimensions -1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪technological feature dimensions-2‬‬
‫‪dimension edition -3‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ tolerancing -4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬

‫‪ dimensions -1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ dimensions -1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ chained dimensions-2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ cumulated dimensions-3‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎ )ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ stacked dimensions-4‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ )ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ length\distance dimensions-5‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻃﻮﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ angle dimensions -6‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺍی‬

‫‪101‬‬
 ‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﻌﺎﻋﯽ‬radius dimensions-7
‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﺮی‬diameter dimensions-8
‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﭘﺦ‬chamfer dimensions-9
‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﺮ و ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺯوﻩ‬threaded dimensions-10
‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺗﯽ‬coordinate dimensions-11
‫ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎ‬hole dimension table -12
‫ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬coordinate dimension table -13

technological feature dimensions-2

Technological Feature Dimensions-1
Multiple Intra Technological Feature Dimensions-2
Technological Feature Dimensions Chained-3
Length Technological Feature Dimensions-4
Angle Technological Feature Dimensions-5
Radius Technological Feature Dimensions -6
Diameter Technological Feature Dimensions -7

‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬dimension edition -3

: ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ‬re-route dimension -1
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬create interruption's -2
‫ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ‬remove interruption's-3

‫ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ‬re-route dimension -1

‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ و و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩو ﻟﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
. ‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

102
 ‫‪create interruption's -2‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭﻫﺎ و ﯾﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺋﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ و‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ add interruption on one side-1‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫‪ add interruption on both side-2‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩو ﻃﺮﻑ‬

‫‪ remove interruption's-3‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ create interruption's‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ remove one interruption -1‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ remove interruption on one side -2‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ remove all interruption -3‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ‬

‫‪ tolerancing -4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩو ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ datum feature -1‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫‪ geometrical tolerance -2‬ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ‬

‫‪ datum feature -1‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺭوی ﺟﺴﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭوی ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ datum feature‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ )‪ (ok‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺗﺜﺒﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪103‬‬
 ‫‪ geometrical tolerance -2‬ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺭوی ﺟﺴﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ geometrical tolerance‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ و ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ insert symbol‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍوﻟﯿﻪ ﺭوی‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ reset‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ )‪ (ok‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭوی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ generation‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ و ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ‬

‫ﺟﺪوﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ generate dimensions -1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ generate dimensions step by step -2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ)ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ(‬
‫‪ balloon generation-3‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ bill of material -4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ generate dimensions‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍ ﺩو ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی و ‪ drafting‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺮ ﺩو ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ window‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ tile vertically‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ generated dimensions‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ constraint analysis in 3D‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﻗﯿﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪ generated constraints -1‬ﻗﯿﺪﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ other constraints -2‬ﺑﻘﯿﻪ ﻗﯿﺪﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ وﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ excluded constraints-3‬ﻗﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ وﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ dimension analysis in 2D‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﯿﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩوﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫‪104‬‬
 ‫‪ new generated dimensions -1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ generated dimensions -2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ‬
‫‪ other dimensions -3‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ ok‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ generate dimensions step by step -2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ)ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ generated dimensions step by step‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ not generated -2‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪ transferred-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ visualization in 3D-4‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫‪ time out -5‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍوﻝ و ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ generated dimensions‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ balloon generation-3‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪generate‬‬
‫‪)numbering‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ bill of material -4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﺍوﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژی )ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﯾﮑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ ( .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺍوﻝ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻫﺮ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻫﺮ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﻣﯿﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪105‬‬
 ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ edit‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪)background‬ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ insert‬و ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ drawing‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ frame and title block‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ style of title block-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ action-2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ creation‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ deletion‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ resizing‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ update‬ﺑﻪ ﺭوﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻩ( ‪ checked by‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫و( ‪ add revision block‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯿﻪ‬
‫‪ apply -3‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ok -4‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ و ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ وﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ title block _ text_....‬و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ‪ definition‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪text‬‬
‫‪ editor‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ edit‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ working view‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ annotations‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ و ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ text-1‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ symbols-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ table-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ‬
‫‪add leader-4‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬

‫‪106‬‬
 ‫‪ text-1‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ text‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺏ(‪ text with leader‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪text replicate‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﺮ وﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺩ(‪ balloon‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻩ(‪ datum target‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫و(‪ text template placement‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬

‫‪ text‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪text editor‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ وﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ symbols-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ roughness symbols-1‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺎﻓﯽ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ‬
‫‪ welding symbols-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺟﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ weld -3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫‪ table-3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ table -‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪوﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ table editor‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ و ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﺪوﻝ ﺭﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪوﻝ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪107‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺟﺪوﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﻫﺮﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ text editor‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍوﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ table from csv -‬ﺍﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺟﺪوﻝ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ import file‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ csv‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ و ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫وﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪوﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪add leader-4‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ dress-up‬وﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ axis and threads-1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ و ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ area fill-2‬ﭘﺮﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ )ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪ arrow -3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻠﺶ‬

‫‪ axis and threads-1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ و ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ center line-1‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ center line with reference-2‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺧﻂ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫‪ tread -3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺯوﻩ‬
‫‪ thread with reference-4‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺯوﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺧﻂ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫‪ axis line -5‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩو ﺧﻂ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯿﮑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺍﺯی ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ axis line and center line-6‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ و ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪108‬‬
 ‫‪ area fill-2‬ﭘﺮﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ)ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ area detection‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩو ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) automatic‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ( و ‪) with profile selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺯﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺩوﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ properties‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺎﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ)ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮو‪ ، (...‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﺷﻮﺭ و ‪ (...‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ arrow -3‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻠﺶ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺶ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ properties‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ geometry creation‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻤﯽ)ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ(‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ profile‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪geometry modification‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ)‪(operation‬‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ operation‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ picture‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ file selection‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪109‬‬
110
 ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪print‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭوﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ file‬و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪print‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ‪ctrl+p‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ و ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ‪c:print‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ print‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺭوﺵ ‪ 4‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ وﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭼﺎپ ‪print‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ print‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ printer‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ layout‬ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ multi documents‬ﭼﺎپ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ print area‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﭼﺎپ و ‪...‬‬
‫ﻩ( ‪ )ok - apply - cancel‬ﻟﻐﻮﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﭼﺎپ ‪ -‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ (‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ printer‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ printer name-1‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭼﺎﭼﮕﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ properties-2‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ print to file‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭼﺎﭘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ‪ file name‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ و ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ prn‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻧﯿﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ و ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﭼﺎپ ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ( ‪ layout‬ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫‪ Position and size‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ وﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪111‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ page setup‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Portrait‬ﻫﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ No fitting‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Fit in page‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Fit to scale‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ و ﯾﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Scale -1‬ﻣﻘﯿﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎ وﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ و ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ left-2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫‪ bottom -3‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫‪ width-4‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫‪ height-5‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫‪ origin-6‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫‪ center-7‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬

‫ﺝ( ‪multi documents‬ﭼﺎپ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬

‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨـﺶ وﻗﺘـﯽ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﻣـﯽ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﮐـﻪ ﻧﻘـﺸﻪ ﻫـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑـﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾـﮏ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ‪ drafting‬ﮐـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﯾـﺪی‬
‫)‪ (sheets‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Range‬وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ all sheets -1‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ active sheet-2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎﺭی(‬
‫‪ sheet numbers-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺎپ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ sheets‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻫـﺮ ﺗﻌـﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ clip to sheet format-4‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻤﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ print detail sheet-5‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﯾﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﯿﺰ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩ( ‪ print area‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﭼﺎپ و ‪...‬‬

‫‪ print area-1‬ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﯾﺮﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪112‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ whole document‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ display‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺍﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ selection‬وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤـﯿﻂ ﺗﺮﺳـﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ) ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺩو ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻥ ( ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ tiling-2‬ﭼﯿﺪﻥ وﺭﻕ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻫﻢ )ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮگ ﺟﺎ ﻧﮕﯿﺮﺩ ( ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭوی ﺁﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ define‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬
‫ﭼﯿﺪﻣﺎﻥ وﺭﻕ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪page setup-3‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪوﺩﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪options-4‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺶ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ و ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ preview-5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ژﯾﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎپ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪print setup‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪) printers‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫـﺎ( ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﮐـﻪ ﻣـﯽ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮑـﯽ ﺍﺯﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫـﺎی ﻧـﺼﺐ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺭوی ﮐـﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ و ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ و ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ set as default‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ add printer‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ file‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪113‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻨﺮ و ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ‬

‫‪Spring & screw design‬‬

‫‪114‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻨﺮ و ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ PART‬و ‪SHAPE‬‬

‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ )‪(HELIX‬‬

‫ﺟﻬــﺖ ﺗﺮﺳــﯿﻢ ﺳــﻪ ﺑﻌــﺪی ﯾــﮏ ﻓﻨــﺮ ﺍﺑﺘــﺪﺍ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻣﻨﺤﻨــﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺳــﻢ ﮔ ـﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺟﻬــﺖ ﺭﺳــﻢ ﺍﯾــﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨــﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳــﺖ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤــﯿﻂ‬
‫‪) generative shape design‬ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ( ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﯾﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪generative shape‬‬ ‫‪design shape‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪start‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ )‪(helix‬‬

‫‪helix‬‬ ‫‪wireframe‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻣﻨﻮی ‪insert‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪helix‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪wireframe‬‬

‫ﺭوﺵ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ )‪(helix‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ helix‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ start point-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ‬
‫‪ axis-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ pitch-3‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ height-4‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫‪ orientation-5‬ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺷﺮوﻉ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ‬
‫‪ starting angle-6‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ‬
‫‪ taper angle.-7‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ ﺷﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻨﺮ ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﯽ‬
‫‪ way-8‬ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﯿﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ profile-9‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ law -10‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩو ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ constant‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ و ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ‪ s type‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ وﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻏﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﯽ‬
‫‪ ok -11‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪115‬‬
 ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ helix‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﺷﺪﻩ و ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ و ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﺧـﻂ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷـﻌﺎﻉ ﻣـﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ ﻣـﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬و ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺭوی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ plane‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪plane‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) normal to curve‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ و ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷـﺮوﻉ ﻣـﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ و ‪ ok‬ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ و وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺷـﺮوﻉ ﺍﯾﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ و ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺭوی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ rib‬ﮐﻠﯿـﮏ ﮐـﺮﺩﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﮐـﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ‪ screw‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫‪116‬‬
 ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻠﺰوﻧﯽ )‪(spiral‬‬
‫ﺟﻬــﺖ ﺗﺮﺳــﯿﻢ ﺳــﻪ ﺑﻌــﺪی ﯾــﮏ ﻓﻨــﺮ ﺍﺑﺘــﺪﺍ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻣﻨﺤﻨــﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺳــﻢ ﮔــﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺟﻬــﺖ ﺭﺳــﻢ ﺍﯾــﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨــﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳــﺖ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤــﯿﻂ‬
‫‪) generative shape design‬ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﺭوﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ( ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﯾﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪generative shape‬‬ ‫‪design shape‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪start‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻠﺰوﻧﯽ )‪(spiral‬‬
‫‪spiral‬‬ ‫‪wireframe‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻣﻨﻮی ‪insert‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪spiral‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪wireframe‬‬

‫ﺭوﺵ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺣﻠﺰوﻧﯽ )‪(spiral‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ spiral‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ support-1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺣﻠﺰوﻥ‬
‫‪ center point-2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺣﻠﺰوﻥ‬
‫‪ reference direction-3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ (ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎی ﺷﺮوﻉ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﯿﭻ‬
‫‪ start radius-4‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺣﻠﺰوﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ orientation-5‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﯿﭽﺶ‬
‫‪ Counterclockwise‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ Clockwise‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ type -6‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺣﻠﺰوﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ angle & radius‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ و ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Radius‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ angle & pitch‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ و ﮔﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Angle‬ﺯﺍوﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ Pitch‬ﮔﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ revolution-7‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩوﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ok -8‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪117‬‬
 ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ spiral‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ وﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﺷﺪﻩ و ﯾـﮏ ﺧـﻂ )ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﺎی ﺷـﺮوﻉ ﺣﻠـﺰوﻥ (و ﯾـﮏ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ‬
‫)ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺣﻠﺰوﻥ ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪.‬و ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺭوی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ plane‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪plane‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) normal to curve‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ و ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺣﻠـﺰوﻥ و ‪ ok‬ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺣﻠﺰوﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوﻉ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬و ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ و وﺭوﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sketch‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺷـﺮوﻉ ﺍﯾﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ و ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ sketch‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ part‬ﺭوی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ rib‬ﮐﻠﯿـﮏ ﮐـﺮﺩﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﮐـﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﭘﺮوﻓﯿﻞ و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ و ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺪی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫‪118‬‬
 ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫‪-1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭوی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ و ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺍوﻝ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ crack‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ و ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ JS0GROUP.dll‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﭙﯽ وﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﺫﯾﻞ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪paste‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪bin\code\intel_a\B14\Dassault Systemes -3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ وﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﯾﺎ ﻣﯿﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺭوی ﺍﯾﮑﻮﻥ ‪ catia‬ﺩﺑﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ tools‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ options‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎوﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺭوی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪licensing and‬‬
‫‪ select any license‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ AC3, AL3, MD2‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻩ و ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ catia‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً وﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ crack‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ Install‬ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪119‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻧﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﮑﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻓﺮﺍﺯی ﺑﺮ ‪catia‬‬

‫‪-2‬ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﯽ ‪ CATIA5-R8‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ و ﺗﺎﻟﯿﻒ ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺗﻀﯽ ﺻﺪﯾﻘﯽ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﭘﻮﺭ‬

‫‪-3‬ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ‪ catia‬ﮔﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﺪی وﮐﯿﻠﯽ – ﻣﺮﺗﻀﯽ ﻧﻮﺭوﺯﯾﺎﻥ‬

‫‪-4‬ﺟـــﺎﻣﻊ ﺗـــﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋـــﻪ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷـــﯽ ﻧـــﺮﻡ ﺍﻓـــﺰﺍﺭ ‪ catia‬ﻣﺤـــﺼﻮﻝ ﮔـــﺮوﻩ ﻓﻨـــﯽ – ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳـــﯽ ﻧﻮﺍﻧﺪﯾـــﺸﺎﻥ ﺳـــﭙﺎﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘـــﺮ‬
‫‪ 47) www.sepahanakhtar.com‬ﺳﯽ ﺩی (‬

‫‪ CD -5‬ﻫﺎی ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﯽ ‪ CATIA Learning‬ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮏ ﺁﭘﺎﺩﺍﻧﺎ)‪ 3‬ﺳﯽ ﺩی(‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ HELP‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 5‬ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪120‬‬